{"title":"Combo deals","description":"\u003cp data-start=\"114\" data-end=\"286\"\u003e\u003cstrong data-start=\"114\" data-end=\"284\"\u003eDiscover our Combo Deals: machines and tools for wood, metal, sheet metal and power tools with exclusive discounts and dedicated free gifts for professionals and hobbyists.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp data-start=\"288\" data-end=\"485\"\u003eWide selection of combined items: circular saws with free blades, lathes with included accessories, milling machines, planers, gardening tools and much more at advantageous prices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp data-start=\"487\" data-end=\"699\"\u003e\u003cstrong data-start=\"487\" data-end=\"544\"\u003eFast shipping and specialized technical assistance.\u003c\/strong\u003e Take advantage of our limited Combo Deals and upgrade your workshop or studio with professional machines and tools complete with accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"bernardo-ad-260-s-pialla-filo-e-spessore-230-v-con-albero-a-spirale-e-lame-tct","title":"Bernardo AD 260 S - 230V Planer Thicknesser Combination with Spiral Cutterblock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 250 mm, a jointer table of 1,090 mm, a spiral cutterblock Ø 75 mm with 24 HM inserts at 4,000 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 185 mm, a feed rate of 4.8 m\/min, and a 2.0 kW single-phase 230V motor. Noise reduction up to 50%. Manufactured in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (jointer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJointer table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,090 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 185 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutterblock:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 24 HM inserts – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.8 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0 kW S1 \/ 2.8 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNoise reduction:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 50% vs HSS knives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 173 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses this machine and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo AD 260 S – 230V with TCT spiral cutterblock is the 250 mm combination planer with HM technology in single-phase: same structure as the standard AD 260 S, same cutterblock with 24 reversible HM inserts, 230V single-phase power supply. For workshops without three-phase power looking for the advantages of TCT cutting edges, reduced noise, minimal maintenance, and consistent quality, at 250 mm width. The 24 HM inserts, each with 4 cutting edges, can be rotated when dull without disassembling the cutterblock. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is used by artisans and restorers who work in noise-sensitive environments or who want to eliminate sharpening from their maintenance routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this machine for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase 230V, reduced noise, minimal maintenance: the quietest and lowest-maintenance 250 mm combination planer in single-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ artisan (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFor workshops without three-phase power that want to eliminate sharpening from their routine. Reduced noise is a concrete advantage in shared work environments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2.0 kW single-phase motor is not sized for intensive industrial cycles. Consider the AD 260 S – 400V three-phase.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot indicated for:\u003c\/strong\u003e those with three-phase power available (consider AD 260 S – 400V); pieces over 250 mm wide; intensive production on hard woods for more than 4 hours\/day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJointer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,090 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHM inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 pcs reversible (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterblock speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e715 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThicknesser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 185 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. depth of cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0 kW (2.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.8 kW (3.8 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 173 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eON\/OFF switch with undervoltage release, anti-kickback rollers, cutterblock guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterblock with 24 mounted HM inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpare HM inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between HM inserts and TCT inserts?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHM (Hartmetall in German) and TCT (Tungsten Carbide Tipped) both refer to tungsten carbide inserts; they are the same technology described with different terminologies (German vs English). The operational characteristics are identical: 4 cutting edges per insert, rotation when worn, 10-20 times longer lifespan than HSS knives, approximately 50% noise reduction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this machine different from the AD 260 S already in the catalog?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the Krollit catalog, the AD 260 S – 230V is listed with two different handles (URLs), this page and the standard one. The technical specifications are identical. If you are considering purchasing, contact Krollit to check which version is available and updated delivery times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do you replace a worn HM insert?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the supplied hex key, 2 minutes per insert, without disassembling the cutterblock. Unscrew the screw, rotate the insert 90° to expose the fresh cutting edge, then screw it back in. When all 4 cutting edges are worn, replace the entire insert. Spare inserts are available from Krollit stock with 3-5 business day shipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine dimensions are 1,150 × 800 × 1,000 mm. For moving workpieces, a clear space of at least 1.8 m in front and behind is needed. At 173 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet truck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow often are the 24 HM inserts rotated?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day) on medium woods, one rotation per insert is needed every 4-8 weeks. With 24 inserts, the rotation is progressive; you never work on all of them at once. Maintenance is spread over several months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692744184136,"sku":"08-1053Combo","price":1692.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_AD_260_S_230V_con_albero_a_spirale.jpg?v=1777483069"},{"product_id":"pialla-a-filo-e-spessore-fs-310-ps-230-v-con-lame-tct","title":"Bernardo FS 310 PS Jointer and Thicknesser Combo - 230V with spiral cutter block","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 PS – 230V planer-thicknesser offers a planing width of 310 mm, a surface planing table of 1,400 mm, a spiral cutter block Ø 75 mm with 30 HM inserts at 4,500 rpm, a maximum thicknessing height of 240 mm, a feed rate of 5.4 m\/min, a 3.0 kW single-phase 230V motor, and an included digital display. Weight approx. 205 kg. Made in Austria, distributed in Italy by Krollit as the official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlaning width (surface planer):\u003c\/strong\u003e 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSurface planing table (length):\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5 – 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutter block:\u003c\/strong\u003e spiral Ø 75 mm – 30 HM inserts – 4,500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThicknessing feed rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.4 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMotor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.0 kW S1 \/ 4.2 kW S6 – 230V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDigital display:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.1 mm scale included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e approx. 205 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the FS 310 PS – 230V and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo FS 310 PS – 230V is the single-phase version of the FS 310 PS: same operating specifications (310 mm, 30-insert TCT cutter block, 240 mm thicknessing height, digital display, 205 kg) in a 230V configuration for workshops without three-phase power. With a 3.0 kW single-phase motor, it is the most powerful combination planer with a TCT spiral cutter block available in single-phase at 310 mm in the Bernardo catalog. For those who want the triple combination of 310 mm width, TCT technology, and single-phase 230V, without compromising on any of the three parameters. In Krollit customers' workshops, it is chosen by joinery shops in non-industrial premises that work wide pieces with high quality requirements and want to eliminate sharpening from maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFS 310 PS – 230V vs FS 310 PS – 400V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSame operating specifications: 310 mm width, 30 HM TCT inserts, 240 mm thicknessing height, digital display, identical dimensions and weight. The only difference is the power supply. With three-phase available, the 400V version is always preferable for more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the 230V is the only option at this level of performance and technology.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). Original Bernardo spare parts available from stock with 3-5 business day shipping. Customer support available in Italian.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Bernardo FS 310 PS – 230V for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassionate hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional machine weighing 205 kg with a 3.0 kW motor. Dimensions geared towards professional use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall joinery \/ craftsman (1-5 employees)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe most complete 310 mm combination planer with TCT available in single-phase: 240 mm thicknessing height, digital display, HM inserts without sharpening. For workshops without three-phase power that do not want to compromise.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous \/ industrial production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 3.0 kW single-phase motor can handle shifts of up to 6-7 hours on medium woods. For more intensive production with three-phase available, prefer the 400V version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e those with three-phase available (prefer FS 310 PS – 400V); pieces over 310 mm wide; intensive production on hardwoods for more than 7 hours\/day in single-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSurface Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e825 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block – diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHM inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 reversible pieces (4 cutting edges\/insert)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutter block speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4,500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,120 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThickness Planer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e305 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassage height (min–max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. stock removal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 mm scale – included as standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 (100%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW (4.0 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 (40%)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.2 kW (5.7 HP)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230V – single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L × W × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 × 900 × 980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 205 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompliance and Safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirective\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinery Directive 2006\/42\/EC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutter block with 30 HM inserts installed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpare HM inserts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDigital display with 0.1 mm scale\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between FS 310 PS – 230V and FS 310 PS – 400V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo constructive difference: same width, same TCT cutter block, same digital display, same dimensions and weight. The difference is only in the power supply: single-phase 230V vs three-phase 400V. With three-phase available, the 400V version is preferable for more uniform motor torque; without three-phase, the 230V is the necessary choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between FS 310 PS – 230V and FS 310 P – 230V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe FS 310 PS mounts 30 HM TCT inserts; the FS 310 P mounts 3 HSS knives. Structure, dimensions, digital display, and weight (205 kg) are identical. TCT offers reduced noise by approx. 50%, 10-20 times longer cutting edge life, and maintenance by insert rotation. The cost of the PS is higher; the maintenance savings recoup this in 12-18 months of professional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow often are the 30 HM inserts rotated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn professional use (4-6 hours\/day) on medium woods, one rotation per insert is necessary every 4-8 weeks. With 30 inserts, rotation is progressive. Complete replacement of an insert only occurs when all 4 cutting edges are worn out, every 4-8 months in professional use. Replacement inserts are available from Krollit stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the 240 mm thicknessing height the highest in single-phase at 310 mm?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Among the 310 mm combination planers in single-phase 230V configuration in the Bernardo catalog, the FS 310 PS – 230V and the FS 310 P – 230V share the record of 240 mm maximum thicknessing height, superior to the AD 310 (225 mm) and the PT 310 S (180 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space is needed in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe machine footprint is 1,400 × 900 × 980 mm. At 205 kg, it can be moved with a manual pallet jack. For material handling, at least 2.5 m of clear space is needed in front and behind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50692746707272,"sku":"combo08-1043","price":2382.25,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_Bernardo_FS_310_PS_con_albero_a_spirale.jpg?v=1777542820"},{"product_id":"combo-laguna-calibratrice-1632-supermax-con-rotolo-abrasivo-25m-k80","title":"Laguna 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll is a sander for professional use, weighing approximately 66 kg. Krollit, official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workpiece width (1 pass): 406 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaximum workpiece width (2 passes): 813 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMinimum\/maximum workable thickness: 0.8 – 76 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrum speed: 1400 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMain motor: 1.5 kW – 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeed speed: Variable 0 – 3 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers use the 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll for sanding solid wood panels, MDF, and plywood, evening out the thickness before finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll is part of the Laguna sander range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit is an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1632 SuperMax Sander with 25M K80 Abrasive Roll is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sanding solid wood, MDF, and plywood panels to even out the thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRestoration and custom production workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: calibrated sanding of large surfaces before finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing metals or plastic materials (machine dedicated to wood: specific sanders are needed for other materials).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrum speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable 0 – 3 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workpiece width (1 pass)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e406 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum workpiece width (2 passes)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e813 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 66 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740 x 560 x 1220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding drum diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e127 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum\/maximum workable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.8 – 76 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW – 230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sanding width does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max. sanding width\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor panels wider than the nominal capacity, multi-pass sanding with precise alignment is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat minimum and maximum thickness does it process?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Min.–max. workpiece thickness\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor thin workpieces, the use of anti-vibration supports is recommended to maintain uniform pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple sanding stations?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2-3 stations with different grits for roughing and finishing in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMultiple stations reduce processing times and standardize finish quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 400 V three-phase for professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVerify the capacity of the electrical line and the presence of a dedicated residual current device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 500 to over 1500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 800 kg require industrial flooring and handling with a forklift during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50730878763336,"sku":"Combo151-1632","price":2127.74,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_LAGUNA_Calibratrice_1632_SuperMax_con_Rotolo_Abrasivo_25M_K80.jpg?v=1777484105"},{"product_id":"torni-laguna-revo-1216-combo","title":"Laguna Revo 1216 Wood Lathe with 4-Piece Replaceable Tip Chisel Set","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Tornio Revo 1216 with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set is a professional wood lathe, weighing 56.3 kg. Krollit, official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 750 W (230 V)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed range: 50–525 \/ 325–1750 \/ 650–3500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax working diameter: 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 390 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle thread: M33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeadstock\/tailstock taper: MK2 \/ MK2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Revo 1216 Lathe with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArtisan woodturners and joineries use the Revo 1216 Lathe with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set for turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects, creating turned elements for furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Tornio Revo 1216 with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set is part of the Laguna wood lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the Revo 1216 Lathe with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Revo 1216 lathe with 4 replaceable tip chisels set is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArtisan woodturners\u003c\/strong\u003e: turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJoineries and restoration workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: creating turned elements for furniture and historical reconstruction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal turning (machine dedicated to wood: specific lathes with adequate torque and speed are needed for metals).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–525 \/ 325–1750 \/ 650–3500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle thread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM33 × 3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 × 226 × 442 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56.3 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e920 × 380 × 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight with packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e61 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeadstock\/tailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK2 \/ MK2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTool rest\/tailstock bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 mm \/ 17 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eQuill adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfessional production\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax working diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 W (230 V)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size workpiece can the Revo 1216 Lathe with 4 Replaceable Tip Chisels Set turn?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Distance between centers\" and \"Max diameter over bed\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop lathes handle workpieces up to 700-1,000 mm between centers; professional models reach 1,500 mm and beyond. For large diameter bowls, check the free overhang.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the spindle speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, adjustment via belt change (stepped) or electronic variator (Vario) depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (200-500 rpm) for large diameter workpieces or roughing, high speeds (1,500-3,000 rpm) for finishing on small workpieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle mount does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically M33x3.5 thread or MK 2 on the spindle. Check the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard mounts allow the use of interchangeable accessories (self-centering chucks for bowls, live centers, etc.) available on the market.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat motor power does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Motor power\" in the technical table: typically 0.5-2 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive turning of large workpieces, at least 1.5 kW is needed. Hobby benchtop models range from 0.3 to 0.75 kW for occasional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom approximately 30 kg (mini-lathes) to over 200 kg (professional with base).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive use, a lathe weighing over 80 kg is recommended to dampen vibrations and ensure machining precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":50730880434504,"sku":"151-1216Combo","price":1683.86,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Tornio_per_legno_Laguna_Revo_1216_compatto_e_preciso.jpg?v=1777587575"},{"product_id":"sega-circolare-banco-laguna-fusion-1","title":"Laguna Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT Blade and Riving Knife","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife is a manual circular saw for professional use, with a 1450 W motor, weighing 110 kg. Krollit, official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower input: 1450 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower output: 1100 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade: 250 x 30 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArbor speed: 3800 RPM\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade tilt: 0–45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax cut at 90°: 79 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife is a manual circular saw for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife is part of Laguna's range of manual circular saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobile carpentry workshops and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: portable straight cuts on boards and battens directly on site.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpenters and installers\u003c\/strong\u003e: installation work with manual tools for quick cuts on lightweight materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e stationary precision cuts on large panels (for series production, consider fixed table saws or panel saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cut at 90°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e79 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cut at 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParallel capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e765 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 x 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArbor speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3800 RPM\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCast iron table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e792 x 506 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e792 x 1116 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1450 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the cutting capacity of the Fusion 1 Table Saw with CMT blade and Riving Knife?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting capacity\" in the technical table for maximum thickness at 90° and 45°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity at 45° is always less than the cut at 90°. Check both values if you often make angled cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSupported blade diameter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Blade diameter\" in the table: typically Ø 250-350 mm for professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger blades offer greater cutting depth but require adequate motor power. Check the standard arbor bore.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it run on 230 V or 400 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Voltage\" in the table: the MKS-351 model is available in 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional circular saws over 2.2 kW require a three-phase line. Check for power supply availability on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional saws have a dust extractor port with a typical diameter of Ø50-100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential to reduce breathable dust and maintain visibility in the cutting area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it suitable for on-site use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, manual saws are designed for frequent relocation and on-site cutting of boards and battens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor stationary production of large panels, consider fixed table saws with a sliding carriage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52709102387528,"sku":"151-Fusion1EV","price":1883.95,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_Circolare_da_Banco_Professionale_Combo_Deal.jpg?v=1777482907"},{"product_id":"pialla-filo-spessore-bernardo-pt-250-230v","title":"Bernardo PT 250 Planer Thicknesser Planer thicknesser with knives and setting gauge","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge is a planer-thicknesser for professional use, weighing 29 kg. Krollit has been an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaning width: 255 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable length: 925 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 8500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of blades: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle diameter: 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaner fence: 620 x 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge is a planer-thicknesser for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge fits into the range of Bernardo planer-thicknessers, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days in the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PT 250 planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: planing and thicknessing of boards, battens, and solid wood with precise dimensional tolerance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFurniture factories and window\/door manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: surface preparation and board calibration before subsequent assembly operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e planing chipboard or MDF panels (machine for solid wood: composite panels damage the knives, consider calibrating machines).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e255 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e925 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° to 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 - 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e29 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of blades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaner fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e620 x 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknessing width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat planing width does the PT 250 Planer-thicknesser with blades and setting gauge offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Planing width\" in the technical table: typically 250 to 410 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe width determines the maximum width of the board that can be worked in a single pass. For wider boards, a double pass or a larger machine is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCutter block or spiral?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the model: the \"S\" or \"Spiral\" version has a helical cutter block with HM inserts, the others have standard HSS knives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe spiral cutter block produces less noise, better finish, and 5-10 times longer tool life, but costs more. The inserts are rotated individually when worn.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eMinimum and maximum workable thickness?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Min\/max thickness\" in the technical table: typically from 4 mm to 230 mm in height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe minimum thickness is limited by the safety devices; the maximum depends on the clearance under the thicknessing spindle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have quick changeover from planing to thicknessing?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models allow switching functions in a few seconds by tilting the tables.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReduced setup time is advantageous for those who frequently alternate between the two functions in series production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Voltage\" in the table: typically 400 V three-phase for professional machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with motors over 2.2 kW require a three-phase line. Verify availability in the workshop before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52709330977096,"sku":"08-1007HO","price":533.14,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Bernardo_PT_250_Pialla_filo_spessore_con_lame_e_calibro_di_registrazione.jpg?v=1777486353"},{"product_id":"piallatrici-bernardo-pt-260-230v-combo","title":"Bernardo PT 260 230V Planer and Thicknesser with Blades and Filter Bag","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag is a jointer and thickness planer for professional use, with a 1.6 kW \/ 2.1 HP motor, weighing 75 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaning width: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eJointer table length: 1050 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable height: 885 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaner shaft speed: 6700 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of blades: 2 HSS pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaner shaft diameter: 55 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag is a professional jointer and thickness planer distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag is part of the Bernardo jointer and thickness planer range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer assistance available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe jointer and thickness planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: jointing and thicknessing of boards, battens, and solid wood with precise dimensional tolerance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFurniture factories and window\/door production\u003c\/strong\u003e: surface preparation and board calibration before subsequent assembly operations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e planing chipboard or MDF panels (machine for solid wood: composite panels damage the blades, consider sanding machines).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser planing width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThicknesser capacity min.\/max.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 – 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. chip removal thicknesser\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaner shaft speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6700 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 x 20 x 2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePT 260\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJointer table length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e885 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence inclination\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1050 x 650 x 1050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1 100%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6 kW \/ 2.1 HP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6 40%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.2 kW \/ 3.0 HP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of blades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 HSS pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaner shaft diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJointer fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 x 110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. chip removal jointer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat planing width does the Jointer and Thickness Planer PT 260 230V with blade and filter bag offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Planing width\" in the technical table: typically from 250 to 410 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe width determines the maximum width of the board that can be processed in a single pass. For wider boards, a double pass or a larger machine is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eKnife or helical cutterhead?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the model: the \"S\" or \"Spirale\" version has a helical cutterhead with HM inserts, the others have standard HSS knives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe helical cutterhead produces less noise, a better finish, and 5-10 times longer tool life, but it costs more. The inserts can be rotated individually when worn.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eMinimum and maximum working thickness?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Min\/max thickness\" in the technical table: typically from 4 mm to 230 mm in height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe minimum thickness is limited by the safety of the protective devices; the maximum depends on the clearance under the thicknesser shaft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have quick change jointer\/thicknesser?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models allow changing functions in a few seconds by tilting the tables.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReduced setup time is beneficial for those who frequently alternate between the two functions in series production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Voltage\" in the table: typically 400 V three-phase for professional machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eModels with motors over 2.2 kW require a three-phase line. Check availability in the workshop before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52744264974664,"sku":"08-1022151","price":1066.28,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Bernardo_Pialla_a_filo_e_spessore_PT_260_230V_con_lama_e_sacco_filtro.jpg?v=1777487110"},{"product_id":"bernardo-sm-180-s-bordatrice-manuale-guanti-combo","title":"Bernardo SM 180 S Sheet Metal Bending Machine Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included is a sheet metal bending machine for professional use, weighing approx. 19 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. sheet thickness (400 N\/mm²): 0.8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoller spacing: 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking depth: 200 mm (170 mm with stop)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions (L x W x H): 510 x 900 x 550 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: approx. 19 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetal fabricators and sheet metal workshops use the SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included for bending sheet metal in the manufacture of cabinets, profiles, and metal casings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included is part of the Bernardo sheet metal bending machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SM 180 S Manual Flanging Machine + Gloves Included is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetal fabricators and sheet metal workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: bending sheet metal for the manufacture of cabinets, profiles, and casings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine and metal container construction\u003c\/strong\u003e: making 90° bends and various angles on standard sheet metal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e bending pipes or hollow profiles (machine dedicated to flat sheet metal: specific tube benders are needed for pipes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. sheet thickness (400 N\/mm²)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm (170 mm with stop)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e510 x 900 x 550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 19 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sheet metal thickness can it bend?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Bending capacity\" in the technical table: typically up to 3-6 mm on mild steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to nominal S235 steel. For stainless steel or high-strength steel, the actual capacity may decrease to 60-70% of the stated value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the useful length it offers?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bending length is indicated in the technical table (typically 1,000-3,000 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe useful length determines the maximum size of the workpiece that can be bent in a single pass. Longer workpieces require larger machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat bending angles are possible?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 0° to 135° with a standard V-punch. Check the technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 90° bends or specific angles, dedicated punches and dies can be used. Krollit supplies original Bernardo bending tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the machine have CNC control?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer CNC control for automatic angle positioning and back gauge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCNCs reduce setup times in series production and offer repeatability in the finished product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHydraulic bending machines require 400 V three-phase power supply; see \"Motor power\" for the precise data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVerify the presence of an adequate three-phase line and size the cables based on the nominal power of the hydraulic unit motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52767862325576,"sku":"Combo06-1075B","price":272.36,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Bernardo_SM_180_S_Bordatrice_Manuale_con_Guanti_Inclusi.jpg?v=1777488295"},{"product_id":"sega-nastro-metallo-guede-mbs-1100-lama-bimetallica","title":"Guede metal bandsaw Guede MBS 1100W + Bimetal Blade 1140 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Band Saw Güde MBS 1100W + Bimetal Blade 1140 mm is a metal band saw for professional use available at Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 1100 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 1140 x 13 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTeeth per inch: 6 TPI\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade type: Bimetal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Güde MBS 1100W Band Saw + 1140 mm Bimetal Blade and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the Güde MBS 1100W Band Saw + 1140 mm Bimetal Blade for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede Band Saw Güde MBS 1100W + 1140 mm Bimetal Blade is part of the Guede metal band saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Güde MBS 1100W Band Saw + 1140 mm Bimetal Blade for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Güde MBS 1100W band saw + 1140 mm bimetal blade is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cuts on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular metal saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1140 x 13 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTeeth per inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 TPI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBimetal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the Güde MBS 1100W Band Saw + 1140 mm Bimetal Blade cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, pipes, solid bars, and laminates in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cut quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768034947400,"sku":"405531","price":171.94,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Sega_a_Nastro_G_de_MBS_1100W.jpg?v=1777580047"},{"product_id":"sega-nastro-metallo-bernardo-ebs-128-cl-lama-hss-1638","title":"Bernardo Metal Cutting Bandsaw EBS 128 CL 230V + HSS Blade 1638 mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Metal Bandsaw EBS 128 CL 230V + HSS Blade 1638 mm is a professional metal bandsaw available from Krollit, an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 1638 x 13 x 0.65 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTeeth: 14 TPI\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade type: HSS\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStructure: With stand\/base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the EBS 128 CL 230V Metal Bandsaw + HSS Blade 1638 mm and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the EBS 128 CL 230V Metal Bandsaw + HSS Blade 1638 mm for cutting steel, aluminium and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Metal Bandsaw EBS 128 CL 230V + HSS Blade 1638 mm is part of Bernardo's range of metal bandsaws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalogue on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the EBS 128 CL 230V Metal Bandsaw + HSS Blade 1638 mm for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ebs 128 cl 230v metal bandsaw + hss blade 1638 mm is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting of thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1638 x 13 x 0.65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTeeth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14 TPI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHSS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWith stand\/base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the EBS 128 CL 230V Metal Bandsaw + HSS Blade 1638 mm cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars and rolled steel, aluminium and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimise cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminium. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fixing. The machine must be positioned in clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768138854728,"sku":"Combo04-1110","price":963.8,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Sega_a_Nastro_Metallo_Bernardo_EBS_128_CL_230V_con_Lama_HSS_1638_mm.jpg?v=1777488661"},{"product_id":"levigatrice-nastro-disco-guede-gbts-400-dischi-k60-150","title":"Guede Combo Belt and Disc Sander Güde GBTS 400 350W + K60 Ø150 mm Discs","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Belt and Disc Sander Combo Güde GBTS 400 350W + K60 Ø150 mm Discs is a professional abrasive consumable available from Krollit, an official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 350 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisc diameter: 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisc grit: K60\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbrasive type: Velcro (Klett)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Guede GBTS 400 350W Belt and Disc Sander Combo + K60 Ø150 mm Discs and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWorkshops, joinery shops, and body shops use the Guede GBTS 400 350W Belt and Disc Sander Combo + K60 Ø150 mm Discs for sanding, finishing, and surface preparation on the materials and grits indicated in the specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Belt and Disc Sander Combo Güde GBTS 400 350W + K60 Ø150 mm Discs is part of the Guede abrasive consumables range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse for spare parts and accessories. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation and compatibility verification with the reference machine. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Guede GBTS 400 350W Belt and Disc Sander Combo + K60 Ø150 mm Discs for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Guede GBTS 400 350W belt and disc sander combo + K60 Ø150 mm discs is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops, joinery shops, and body shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: sanding, finishing, and surface preparation in the indicated grits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsers with compatible machines (diameter\/attachment)\u003c\/strong\u003e: original replacement for the machines indicated in the description.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials outside product specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e: verify the grit and supported material to avoid damaging the piece.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisc diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisc grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eK60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbrasive type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVelcro (Klett)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich grit should I choose for my work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eK36-K60 for roughing and paint\/glue removal; K80-K120 for intermediate sanding; K150-K240 for pre-painting finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eK36 grit is too aggressive for sharpening tools (damages the edge). For HSS sharpening use K60-K80. For sanding soft wood start with K80, hard wood K100. Progressively increase: each grit approximately doubles the fineness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eNormal corundum or zirconium corundum?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormal corundum for wood (red); zirconium corundum (blue) for metal or intensive use, it is self-sharpening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormal corundum is the universal choice for wood and finishes. Zirconium is more aggressive, recommended for iron and light alloys, and maintains its edge thanks to its self-sharpening action (fragments exposing new grains).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich machine\/size is it compatible with?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the belt dimensions (e.g. 75×533 mm, 100×610 mm) or disc dimensions (Ø 115, 125, 150 mm) in the title.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSanding belts should be chosen based on the circumference of the sander's roller. Common sizes: 40×303 mm (handheld), 75×533 mm (benchtop), 100×610 mm (semi-industrial). Also check the direction of travel (arrows on the back).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pieces does the package contain?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Packaging\" or \"Quantity\" in the product's technical sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit provides standard manufacturer packaging (typically 5, 10 or 25 pieces). For intensive professional use, it is advisable to keep a stock of at least 2-3 packs of different grits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow should abrasive consumables be stored?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn a dry place, away from heat sources and humidity, keeping the original packaging closed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHumidity degrades the binder of the sandpaper and drastically reduces its lifespan. For belts not in use, hang them vertically to avoid permanent creases that cause slippage during operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768290144584,"sku":"55135 22140","price":91.2,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Levigatrice_Nastro_e_Disco_G_de_GBTS_400_350W.jpg?v=1777579445"},{"product_id":"combo-bernardo-bhs-300x12-cesoia-manuale-guanti","title":"Bernardo BHS 300 x 1.2 Hydraulic Guillotine Shear + Gloves","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo Manual Shears BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves is a hydraulic guillotine shear for professional use, weighing 15 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting length: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. sheet metal thickness (400 N\/mm²): 1.2 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. aluminum thickness: 1.2 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. brass thickness: 0.6 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. steel thickness: 0.5 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 300 x 335 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves Manual Shears and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetal fabrication shops and sheet metal workshops use the BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves Manual Shears for straight cutting of steel, aluminum, and stainless steel sheets, with repetitive cycles on standard sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Manual Shears BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves fits into the Bernardo guillotine shear range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves Manual Shears for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BHS 300 x 1.2 + Gloves manual shears are recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetal fabrication shops and sheet metal workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: straight cutting of steel, aluminum, and stainless steel sheets.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSerial sheet metal processing\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive cycles on standard sheets up to declared thicknesses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e shaped and curved cuts (the shears only perform straight cuts: for shapes, consider punching machines or lasers).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. sheet metal thickness (400 N\/mm²)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. aluminum thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. brass thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.6 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. steel thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 335 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (L x W x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 x 450 x 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBack gauge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sheet metal thickness can it cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting capacity\" in the technical table: typically 1 to 6 mm on mild steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to S235 steel. For stainless steel or high-strength alloys, the actual capacity is lower (approximately 70-80% of the declared value).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does the hydraulic system work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHydraulic unit with electric pump and cylinders that actuate the moving blade against the fixed blade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe hydraulic system requires periodic maintenance with specific hydraulic oil. The pressure is factory-set for nominal capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting length does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe effective length is indicated in the technical table (typically 1,000-3,000 mm).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutting length determines the maximum size of the workpiece that can be processed in a single pass. For longer pieces, multiple passes with repositioning are necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the machine have guides and stops?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional hydraulic shears have a back gauge with an adjustable stop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stop allows repeated cuts to the same dimension without the need for marking. Advanced models offer CNC for automatic positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat electrical power does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Motor power\" in the technical table: typically 4 to 22 kW (400 V three-phase).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShears are industrial machines that require a dedicated 400 V three-phase power line. Check the power consumption at startup to correctly size the cables.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768316326216,"sku":"Combo06-1588","price":368.56,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Cesoia_Manuale_Bernardo_BHS_300_x_1_2_con_Guanti_Inclusi.jpg?v=1777489621"},{"product_id":"trapano-fresatrice-bernardo-kf-20-l-super-set-maschi-hss","title":"Bernardo Drill-Milling Machine KF 20 L Super + 21pc HSS Tap Set","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set is a drill-mill for professional use, available from Krollit, an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSet included: 21-piece HSS tap set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine type: Drill mill\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachinable materials: Metals (steel, iron, etc.)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shops and prototyping laboratories use the KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set for combined drilling, milling, and tapping operations on metal parts. The inclinable head allows for angled machining.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set is part of the Bernardo range of drill-mills, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KF 20 L Super drilling and milling machine + 21-piece HSS tap set is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmall and medium mechanical workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: combined drilling, milling, and tapping operations on metal parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrototyping laboratories and maintenance technicians\u003c\/strong\u003e: creation of keyways, holes, and angled machining with an inclinable head.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMulti-shift industrial production\u003c\/strong\u003e: for intensive continuous cycles, consider HSV ranges or universal milling machines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the KF 20 L Super Drilling and Milling Machine + 21-piece HSS Tap Set work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrilling, face milling, end milling, and tapping on mild steels, cast iron, and light alloys.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDeclared capacities refer to standard unhardened steels. For alloy steels, reduce feed and cutting speed to preserve tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Spindle speed\" data in the technical table: Vario adjustment or mechanical step change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment via inverter or keypad, while mechanical gear models (e.g., BF 30 G) require manual range selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Voltage\" data in the technical table: typically 230 V single-phase or 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarge models (BF 45, FM 45, FM 50) require a 400 V three-phase line. Check availability in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the head inclinable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, see \"Head tilt\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHead tilt allows for angled milling and chamfering without complex workpiece clamping. More advanced models offer tilt up to ±90°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approx. 50 kg (KF 10) to over 350 kg (BF 45 HSV Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor models over 200 kg, installation on a dedicated base is recommended. For lighter models, a robust and flat workbench is sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768348438856,"sku":"02-10161","price":1193.77,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Trapano_Fresatrice_Bernardo_KF_20_L_Super.jpg?v=1777491036"},{"product_id":"combo-bernardo-wk-10-th-pressa-officina-guanti","title":"Sheet metal press Bernardo from Officina WK 10 TH + Gloves","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Workshop Press WK 10 TH + Gloves is a sheet metal press for professional use, with a force of 10 tons, a stroke of 180 mm, and a weight of 55 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePressure force: 10 tons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePiston stroke: 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable width: 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClearance (E): 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClearance (F): 95 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCylinder – table distance (F1): 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the WK 10 TH Workshop Press + Gloves and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetal fabrication shops and sheet metal workshops use the WK 10 TH Workshop Press + Gloves for deep drawing, stamping, and forming sheet metal up to the declared thickness, with repeated cycles on dedicated dies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Workshop Press WK 10 TH + Gloves is part of the Bernardo sheet metal press range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the WK 10 TH Workshop Press + Gloves for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe WK 10 TH workshop press + gloves is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetal fabrication and sheet metal workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: deep drawing, stamping, and forming of sheet metal up to the declared thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduction of stamped metal components\u003c\/strong\u003e: repeated pressing cycles on a single bench with dedicated dies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e stamping fragile or ceramic materials (machine optimized for metals: specific presses are needed for other materials).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder – table distance (F1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder – table distance (F2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e365 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall width (A)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum height (C)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e735 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum height (D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1070 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClearance (E)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClearance (F)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e95 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSliding cylinder (M)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePiston stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall depth (B)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure force\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 tons\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sheet metal thickness can the WK 10 TH Workshop Press + Gloves handle?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Capacity\" or \"Max thickness\" in the product's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to mild steel S235JR. For stainless steel or high-strength materials, the actual capacity may drop to 60-70%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat pressing force does it provide?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Force\" or \"Press power\" in the technical table, typically expressed in tons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe nominal force determines the type of dies that can be used and the materials that can be processed. For series production, verify the nominal force and the work cycle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have CNC or manual control?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer CNC control for automatic positioning; compact models have manual or semi-automatic control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCNC reduces setup times in series production and offers repeatability on the finished product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 400 V three-phase for industrial models; compact models can be 230 V single-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVerify the presence of an adequate three-phase line and size the cables according to the motor's nominal power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 500 to over 5000 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 1000 kg require industrial flooring and forklift handling during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768427376968,"sku":"Combo06-1704","price":333.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Pressa_da_Officina_Bernardo_WK_10_TH.jpg?v=1777492157"},{"product_id":"mini-tornio-bernardo-hobby-350-vd-utensili-carburo-8mm","title":"Bernardo Hobby 350 VD Metal Lathe + 8mm Carbide Tools 5pcs","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools is a metal lathe for professional use available at Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTools included: 5 carbide tools 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine type: Mini benchtop lathe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed control: Variable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools for cylindrical and conical turning and threading operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools is part of the Bernardo metal lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical and conical turning and threading on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintainers and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: processing of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small production runs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for occasional home use, consider smaller benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Hobby 350 VD Lathe + 8 mm 5pc Carbide Tools work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steel, alloy steel, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check the compatibility of the chuck and Morse taper tailstock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts provided, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 working days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact benchtop machines are often 230 V single-phase, professional models 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400 V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, benchtop ones are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies significantly by model: see the \"Weight\" entry in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and fastening with anchors. Benchtop models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy workbench with an adequately sized top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768432456008,"sku":"03-1026B1","price":1134.23,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Tornio_Bernardo_Hobby_350_VD.jpg?v=1777492803"},{"product_id":"tornio-bernardo-profi-450-s-utensili-carburo-12mm","title":"Bernardo Profi 450 S 230V Metal Lathe + 12mm 5-piece Carbide Tool Set","description":"\u003cp\u003eBernardo Lathe Profi 450 S 230V + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools is a metal lathe for professional use available at Krollit, an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTools included: 5 carbide tools 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine type: Bench lathe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStructure: Robust and compact\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Profi 450 S 230V Lathe + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners use the Profi 450 S 230V Lathe + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools for cylindrical and conical turning and threading operations on steels and alloys. The machine supports the production of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBernardo Lathe Profi 450 S 230V + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools is part of the Bernardo metal lathe range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Profi 450 S 230V Lathe + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi 450 S 230V lathe + 12 mm 5pc carbide tools is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and artisan turners\u003c\/strong\u003e: cylindrical and conical turning and threading on steels and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndustrial maintainers and repair centers\u003c\/strong\u003e: machining of spare parts, shafts, bushings, and small production runs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyists and model making\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for occasional home use, consider smaller bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat materials can the Profi 450 S 230V Lathe + 12 mm 5pc Carbide Tools work on?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMild steels, alloy steels, cast iron, brass, and aluminum within the limits indicated in the technical specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hardened or high-strength alloy steels, it is advisable to reduce cutting speed and depth of cut. The machine is sized for general mechanical production; for special alloys, check the compatibility of the chuck and Morse taper tailstock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the standard equipment?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a self-centering chuck, tailstock, steady rest, threading accessories, and a set of wrenches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the exact list of accessories and spare parts provided, consult the manufacturer's technical data sheet. Krollit provides support for original Bernardo spare parts with delivery times of 3-5 business days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the voltage data in the technical table. Compact bench machines are often 230V single-phase, professional models 400V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 400V three-phase models, an industrial power line is required. Verify the presence of adequate power supply in the workshop before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the machine suitable for series production?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the model class: professional Bernardo lathes handle continuous cycles, bench lathes are suitable for medium use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Profi and Apollo models are designed for intensive multi-shift use; the Hobby and Goliath series for occasional use or small workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies significantly by model: see \"Weight\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 500 kg require industrial flooring and fixing with anchor bolts. Bench models up to 100 kg are installed on a sturdy bench with an adequately sized top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52768451789128,"sku":"combo03-1045","price":2288.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Tornio_Bernardo_Profi_450_S_230V.jpg?v=1777494007"},{"product_id":"sega-nastro-guede-gbs-200s-350w","title":"Guede GBS 200S 350W Wood Bandsaw with Included Blade","description":"\u003cp\u003eGuede Band Saw GBS 200S 350W with Included Blade is a band saw for wood for professional use, with a cutting height of 80 mm (90°), a speed of 1500 rpm, a 350 W motor, and a weight of 16 kg. Krollit, official Guede distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 350 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor speed: 1500 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 900 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade length: 1400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade width: 6.79 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GBS 200S 350W Band Saw with Included Blade and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers use the GBS 200S 350W Band Saw with Included Blade for straight, curved, and re-sawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels, with adjustable speed and tilting table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Guede range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuede Band Saw GBS 200S 350W with Included Blade is part of Guede's range of wood band saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Guede range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Guede catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the GBS 200S 350W Band Saw with Included Blade is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GBS 200S 350W band saw with included blade is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: straight, curved, and re-sawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdvanced hobbyists and craft workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision work on single pieces and small series, model making, and marquetry.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing metals or hard industrial materials (machine dedicated to wood: for metals, use metal band saws with reduced speed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1500 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.79 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0° – 45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNoise level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 dB\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax cutting height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm (90°)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting capacity does the GBS 200S 350W Band Saw with Included Blade offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting width\" and \"Cutting height\" in the technical table: typically 225-305 mm in width and 95-170 mm in height for benchtop\/semi-pro models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting width is the distance between the blade and the machine's neck. Cutting height determines the maximum thickness of the workpiece. For re-sawing on large pieces (250+ mm), professional models with Ø 500+ mm flywheels are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple cutting speeds?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2 speeds (e.g., 370\/800 m\/min) to adapt to materials: low for hardwoods, high for softwoods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower speeds reduce the risk of burning on hard woods (oak, beech). High speeds optimize performance on pine and particleboard panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the table tiltable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a table that can be tilted up to 45° for angled cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tilt allows for bevel cuts for joints and furniture details. Check for a stop for 0° tilt for repeatability on straight cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop and compact models are 230 V single-phase (0.3-0.75 kW motor). Professional models with 500+ mm flywheels require 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops without a three-phase line, choose HBS 320, HBS 360, or HBS 400 (single-phase) models. HBS 500 N and HBS 600 N models require mandatory three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an integrated dust extraction connection?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a Ø 50-100 mm dust extraction connection for linking to a chip extraction system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for workshop air quality. Krollit supplies compatible Bernardo DC series extractors and dedicated connection hoses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52777967288648,"sku":"combo83813","price":123.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_a_nastro_G_de_GBS_200S_350W_per_lavorazioni_di_precisione.png?v=1777557836"},{"product_id":"combo-laguna-v10-230v-750w-supporto-v10-g8","title":"Laguna V10 230V 750W Wood Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna Bandsaw V10 230V 750W with V10\/G8 Stand is a professional-grade wood bandsaw with a cutting width of 202 mm, speeds of 462 and 1000 m\/min, and a weight of 42.5 kg. Krollit, official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSaw model: V10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 750 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface dimensions: 350 x 318 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade length min \/ max: 1780 \/ 1800 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade width min \/ max: 3 \/ 13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the V10 230V 750W Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers use the V10 230V 750W Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand for straight, curved, and resawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels, with adjustable speed and tilting table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna V10 230V 750W Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand is part of Laguna's range of wood bandsaws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipment in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South of Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipment in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the V10 230V 750W Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe V10 230V 750W bandsaw with V10\/G8 stand is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpentry workshops and furniture manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: straight, curved, and resawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdvanced hobbyists and artisanal workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision work on single pieces and small series, model making, and inlay.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing metals or hard industrial materials (machine dedicated to wood: for metals, use metal bandsaws with reduced speed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum cutting height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e146 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum cutting width with parallel guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e202 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum cutting width to the column\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e244 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length min \/ max\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1780 \/ 1800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width min \/ max\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 \/ 13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e462 and 1000 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 x 318 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-5° \/ +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 x 876 x 560 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePacking dimensions (W x H x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 x 455 x 900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight with packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport base footprint (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e700 x 520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport mounting surface (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e419 x 273 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum support height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum support height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e781 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSaw model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eV10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust port diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e63 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCertifications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConforms to CE regulations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand usage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBandsaw and grinder stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUsage class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-duty stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLaguna V10 \/ G8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting capacity does the V10 230V 750W Bandsaw with V10\/G8 Stand offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting width\" and \"Cutting height\" in the technical table: typically 225-305 mm in width and 95-170 mm in height for benchtop\/semi-pro models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting width is the distance between the blade and the machine's throat. Cutting height determines the maximum thickness of the workpiece. For resawing large pieces (250+ mm), professional models with Ø 500+ mm flywheels are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple cutting speeds?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2 speeds (e.g., 370\/800 m\/min) to adapt to materials: low for hardwoods, high for softwoods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower speeds reduce the risk of burning on hard woods (oak, beech). High speeds optimize performance on pine and particle boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the table inclinable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a table inclinable up to 45° for angled cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tilt allows for bevel cuts for joinery and furniture details. Check for a 0° tilt stop for repeatability on straight cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop and compact models are 230 V single-phase (0.3-0.75 kW motor). Professional models with 500+ mm flywheels require 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops without a three-phase line, choose HBS 320, HBS 360, or HBS 400 models (single-phase). HBS 500 N and HBS 600 N models require mandatory three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an integrated dust extraction port?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a Ø 50-100 mm dust extraction port for connection to a chip extraction system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for air quality in the workshop. Krollit provides compatible Bernardo DC series extractors and dedicated connection hoses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52783718629704,"sku":"Combo151-V10","price":754.15,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Laguna_Sega_a_Nastro_V10_230V_750W_con_Supporto_V10_G8_in_Omaggio.png?v=1777534433"},{"product_id":"combo-bernardo-db450-tornio-legno-mandrini-m33","title":"Bernardo Wood Lathe DB 450 230V + M33 Self-Centering Chucks","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks is a wood lathe for professional use, with a distance between centers of 420 mm, a 0.55 kW motor, and a weight of 36 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power S1: 0.55 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power S6: 0.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 480 - 3800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed adjustment: Continuous (2 ranges)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 420 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArtisan woodturners and carpentry workshops use the DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks for turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects, as well as creating turned elements for furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks fits into Bernardo's range of wood lathes, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DB 450 230V wood lathe + M33 self-centering chucks is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArtisan woodturners\u003c\/strong\u003e: turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry workshops and restoration labs\u003c\/strong\u003e: creating turned elements for furniture and historical reconstruction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal turning (this machine is dedicated to wood: specific lathes with adequate torque and speed are needed for metal).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e480 - 3800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContinuous (2 ranges)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle thread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM33 x 3.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance with extension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1070 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e970 x 300 x 440 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.55 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power S6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over tool rest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of chuck jaws\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChuck type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSelf-centering\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTailstock quill travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size workpiece can the DB 450 230V Wood Lathe + M33 Self-Centering Chucks turn?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Distance between centers\" and \"Max. swing over bed\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench lathes handle workpieces up to 700-1,000 mm between centers; professional models reach 1,500 mm and beyond. For large diameter bowls, check the free overhang.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the spindle speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, adjustment via belt change (stepped) or electronic variator (Vario) depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (200-500 rpm) for large diameter workpieces or roughing, high speeds (1,500-3,000 rpm) for finishing small workpieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle connection does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically M33x3.5 thread or MK 2 on the spindle. Check the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard connections allow the use of interchangeable accessories (self-centering chucks for bowls, live centers, etc.) available on the market.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat motor power does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Motor power\" in the technical table: typically 0.5-2 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive turning of large workpieces, at least 1.5 kW is needed. Hobby bench models range from 0.3 to 0.75 kW for occasional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom approximately 30 kg (mini-lathes) to over 200 kg (professional with base).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive use, a lathe weighing over 80 kg is recommended to dampen vibrations and ensure machining precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52786097127752,"sku":"combo10-1077","price":573.4,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Tornio_Bernardo_Profi_450_S.jpg?v=1777494746"},{"product_id":"calibratrice-bernardo-zsm460dc-230v-abrasivo-omaggio","title":"Bernardo ZSM 460 DC 230V Sander + 100 grit abrasive roll","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Calibrating Sander ZSM 460 DC 230V + 100 grit abrasive roll is a calibrating sander for professional use, with a sanding width of 460 mm (920 mm open), weight 118 kg. Krollit, official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 1.8 kW \/ 2.4 HP\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. working width: 460 mm (920 mm open)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMin. workpiece length: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorkable thickness: 3 – 115 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 470 x 425 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Calibrating Sander ZSM 460 DC 230V + 100 grit abrasive roll and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional woodworking shops and furniture manufacturers use the Calibrating Sander ZSM 460 DC 230V + 100 grit abrasive roll for calibrating solid wood, MDF, and plywood panels, ensuring uniform thickness before finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Calibrating Sander ZSM 460 DC 230V + 100 grit abrasive roll is part of the Bernardo calibrating sander range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Calibrating Sander ZSM 460 DC 230V + 100 grit abrasive roll for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe calibrating sander zsm 460 dc 230v + 100 grit abrasive roll is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional woodworking shops and furniture manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: calibrating solid wood, MDF, and plywood panels to ensure uniform thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRestoration workshops and custom production\u003c\/strong\u003e: calibrated sanding of large surfaces before finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal or plastic processing (machine dedicated to wood: specific sanders are needed for other materials).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.5 – 4 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1420 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e470 x 425 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e915 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1180 x 560 x 1250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e118 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCalibrating roller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 100 x 465 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbrasive included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 mm x 50 m – 100 grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustria\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. working width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e460 mm (920 mm open)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkable thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 – 115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kW \/ 2.4 HP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat sanding width does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Max. sanding width\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor panels wider than the nominal capacity, sanding in multiple passes with precise alignment is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat minimum and maximum thickness does it process?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Min.–max. workpiece thickness\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor thin workpieces, the use of anti-vibration supports is recommended to maintain uniform pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple sanding stations?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2-3 stations with different grits for roughing and finishing in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMultiple stations reduce processing times and ensure uniform finish quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically 400 V three-phase for professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the capacity of the electrical line and the presence of a dedicated residual current device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 500 to over 1500 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachines over 800 kg require industrial flooring and forklift handling during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52786317492552,"sku":"Combo11-43650","price":1494.35,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Calibratrice_Bernardo_ZSM_460_DC_230V.jpg?v=1777548376"},{"product_id":"combo-record-power-pt310-tavolo-rullo-omaggio","title":"Accessory for Record Power Combo PT310 Planer\/Thicknesser 310 mm + FREE Roller Table","description":"\u003cp\u003eRecord Power Combo PT310 Planer 310 mm + FREE Roller Table is a machine tool accessory for professional use, with a 2.75 kW motor, weighing 202 kg. Krollit, official Record Power distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlaning width: 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting depth: 3 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeed rate: 7 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of knives: 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShaft diameter: 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 2.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Combo PT310 Planer 310 mm + FREE Roller Table and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsers who own a compatible machine install the Combo PT310 Planer 310 mm + FREE Roller Table as an original accessory to extend functionalities or replace worn components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Record Power range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecord Power Combo PT310 Planer 310 mm + FREE Roller Table is part of the Record Power machine tool accessories range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Record Power range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Record Power catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse for spare parts and accessories. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation and compatibility verification with the reference machine. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Combo PT310 Planer 310 mm + FREE Roller Table for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo PT310 planer 310 mm + free roller table is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUsers who own the compatible machine\u003c\/strong\u003e: original accessory to extend the functionalities of the indicated machine.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops with specific setup requirements\u003c\/strong\u003e: component for particular machining operations or increased precision.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility with machines of other brands or models\u003c\/strong\u003e: check machine model and specifications before purchasing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaning width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of knives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShaft diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e202 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich machine is it compatible with?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the title or description for the indicated machine model. Krollit only supplies original accessories for the machines in its catalog.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn case of doubts about compatibility, contact Krollit customer support providing the machine's serial number.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it an original spare part?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, Krollit has been an official Bernardo distributor since 2007 and only supplies original manufacturer accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNon-original accessories can compromise the warranty and safety of the machine. It is recommended to always use manufacturer-certified components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the delivery times?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor out-of-stock accessories, procurement times from the manufacturer can be 2-4 weeks. Check availability before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan it be assembled independently?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor simple accessories, yes; for components requiring adjustments or calibrations, the intervention of a qualified technician is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit provides original Bernardo technical documentation for correct assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs there a warranty?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, manufacturer's warranty according to legal terms. The warranty is void if the accessory is installed on incompatible machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeep the invoice as proof of purchase. For warranty requests, contact Krollit customer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Record Power","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52799760367944,"sku":"combo48501","price":2598.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Record_Power_PT310_Pialla_310_mm_con_accessori.jpg?v=1777584500"},{"product_id":"combo-bernardo-kbr-100-x-2000-dc-2-nastro-fine-2000x100","title":"Bernardo Belt Sander KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 + Fine Belt 2000x100","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Belt Grinder KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 + Fine Belt 2000x100 is a professional-grade grinder available from Krollit, an official Bernardo distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt size: 2000 x 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorkable materials: Steel, stainless steel, various metals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncluded belt type: Surface conditioning\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrit: Fine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 Belt Grinder + Fine Belt 2000x100 and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabricators use the KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 Belt Grinder + Fine Belt 2000x100 for sanding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, including deburring and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Bernardo range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bernardo Belt Grinder KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 + Fine Belt 2000x100 is part of the Bernardo grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Bernardo range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Bernardo catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 Belt Grinder + Fine Belt 2000x100 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 belt grinder + fine belt 2000x100 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: sanding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry and production workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, removing cutting burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (final chrome finishes require dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the KBR 100 x 2000 DC-2 Belt Grinder + Fine Belt 2000x100 sand?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific belt grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumables: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer dust extraction ports for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for benchtop and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting; benchtop models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Bernardo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52800070058312,"sku":"05-1307 49-1038","price":2099.61,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Bernardo_Smerigliatrice_a_nastro_KBR_100_x_2000_DC-2.jpg?v=1777496145"},{"product_id":"combo-laguna-14bx-kit-ruote-omaggio","title":"Laguna 14BX Wood Bandsaw with Free Wheel Kit","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit is a professional-grade woodworking bandsaw, featuring a cutting width of 350 mm, a cutting height of 346 mm, a speed of 965 m\/min, and a 1.9 kW motor. Krollit has been an official Laguna distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.9 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting height: 346 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting width: 350 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 965 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade length: 2946 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable tilt: -7° \/ +45°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional carpenters and furniture manufacturers use the 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit for straight, curved, and resawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels, with adjustable speed and a tilting table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Laguna range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Laguna 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit is part of Laguna's range of woodworking bandsaws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Laguna range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Laguna catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit's warehouse. Italian customer support is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 14BX bandsaw with free wheel kit is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional carpenters and furniture manufacturers\u003c\/strong\u003e: Straight, curved, and resawing cuts on solid wood, plywood, and panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdvanced hobbyists and craft workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: Precision work on single pieces and small series, modeling, and inlay.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e processing metals or hard industrial materials (this machine is dedicated to wood: for metals, use metal bandsaws with reduced speed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.9 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e346 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e965 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2946 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable tilt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e-7° \/ +45°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e123 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e,\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting capacity does the 14BX Bandsaw with free Wheel Kit offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting width\" and \"Cutting height\" in the technical table: typically 225-305 mm in width and 95-170 mm in height for benchtop\/semi-pro models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutting width is the distance between the blade and the machine's throat. The cutting height determines the maximum thickness of the workpiece. For resawing large pieces (250+ mm), professional models with 500+ mm diameter flywheels are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have multiple cutting speeds?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer 2 speeds (e.g., 370\/800 m\/min) to adapt to materials: low for hardwoods, high for softwoods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower speeds reduce the risk of burning on hard essences (oak, beech). High speeds optimize performance on pine and particle boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the table inclinable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a tilting table up to 45° for angled cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tilt allows for bevel cuts for joints and furniture details. Check for a 0° tilt stop for repeatability on straight cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop and compact models are 230 V single-phase (0.3-0.75 kW motor). Professional models with 500+ mm flywheels require 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor workshops without a three-phase line, choose HBS 320, HBS 360, or HBS 400 models (single-phase). HBS 500 N and HBS 600 N models require mandatory three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have an integrated dust extraction port?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional models have a Ø 50-100 mm dust extraction port for connection to a chip extraction system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for air quality in the workshop. Krollit supplies compatible Bernardo DC series extractors and dedicated connection hoses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Laguna","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52800542966088,"sku":"combo151-14BX","price":2986.67,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Laguna_14BX_Sega_a_Nastro.jpg?v=1777586730"},{"product_id":"combo-record-power-coronet-regent-sgorbie-omaggio","title":"Record Power Coronet Regent Woodturning Lathe with Free Chisels","description":"\u003cp\u003eRecord Power Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges is a professional woodturning lathe, with 610 mm distance between centers, 2 kW motor, weight 145 kg. Krollit, official Record Power distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 2 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 100 – 3800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwing over bed: 1000 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistance between centers: 610 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTaper: MT2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle thread: M33 x 3.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArtisan woodturners and carpentry shops use the Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges for turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects, creating turned elements for furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Record Power range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Record Power Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges is part of the Record Power range of woodturning lathes, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Record Power range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Record Power catalog on Krollit or contact customer service for selection support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Coronet Regent lathe with free gouges is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArtisan woodturners\u003c\/strong\u003e: turning chair legs, vases, bowls, and decorative objects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and restoration workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: creating turned elements for furniture and historical reconstruction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e metal turning (machine dedicated to wood: metal requires specific lathes with adequate torque and speed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 – 3800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwing over bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDistance between centers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTaper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMT2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle thread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM33 x 3.5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e145 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size workpiece can the Coronet Regent Lathe with free Gouges turn?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Distance between centers\" and \"Max swing over bed\" in the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench lathes handle pieces up to 700-1,000 mm between centers; professional models reach 1,500 mm and more. For bowls with large diameters, check the free overhang.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the spindle speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, adjustment via belt change (stepped) or electronic variator (Vario) depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (200-500 rpm) for large diameter pieces or roughing, high speeds (1,500-3,000 rpm) for finishing on small pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle fitting does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically M33x3.5 thread or MK 2 on the spindle. Check the technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard fittings allow the use of interchangeable accessories (self-centering chucks for bowls, live centers, etc.) available on the market.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat motor power does it have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Motor power\" in the technical table: typically 0.5-2 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive turning of large pieces, at least 1.5 kW is needed. Hobby bench models range from 0.3 to 0.75 kW for occasional use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom approximately 30 kg (mini-lathes) to over 200 kg (professional with stand).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor intensive use, a lathe weighing over 80 kg is recommended to dampen vibrations and ensure machining precision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Record Power","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52800559677768,"sku":"combo18001-EP","price":2496.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Combo_Tornio_Record_Power_Coronet_Regent.jpg?v=1777585953"},{"product_id":"kit-applicatori-colla-silicone-igm-titebond","title":"IGM Silicone Glue Applicator Kit with Titebond Glue of your choice","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIGM Silicone Glue Applicator Kit – 10 tips for dowels, DOMINO, and biscuits, tray included, with choice of Titebond glue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM silicone applicator kit is an accessory for hobbyist-professional use, consisting of 10 soft silicone tips for uniform glue distribution in dowel holes (6, 8, 10, and 12 mm), DOMINO (6, 8, and 10 mm), biscuit joinery, grooves, thin slots, and narrow holes, with an included silicone tray for collecting excess glue. Available in a combo with your choice of Titebond glue: Original D2, II Premium D3, or III Ultimate D4. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official IGM and Titebond distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 6 mm dowel tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 8 mm dowel tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 10 mm dowel tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 12 mm dowel tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 6 mm DOMINO tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 8 mm DOMINO tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eØ 10 mm DOMINO tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBiscuit joinery tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGroove tip: 1 pc\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlot \/ narrow hole tip: 2 pcs (capillary slot + narrow hole)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSilicone tray with front slots for glue recovery and tip rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlastic handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGlue included: Titebond of your choice (selectable variant)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Titebond glue to choose for your needs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo is available with three Titebond glue variants. The choice depends on the application environment and the required water resistance level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eEN 204 Class\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOpen time\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMin. application temp.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhen to choose it\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Original\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor carpentry, furniture, stairs, parquet: high initial tack, fast clamping, yellow color after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond II Premium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow frames, outdoor furniture, structures exposed to occasional humidity: only single-component D3 glue certified EN 204, compatible with RF and hot press systems\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond III Ultimate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplications with prolonged water exposure, cutting boards and food contact products, outdoor construction: resistance to mold, solvents, and heat, applicable at lower temperatures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this kit for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisan carpenter with dowel or DOMINO joinery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 4 dowel tips (6–12 mm) and 3 DOMINO tips cover all standard Festool DOMINO DF 500 and DF 700 sizes; the soft silicone distributes glue on the inner walls of the hole without clogging it\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHobbyist with occasional use of biscuits or lamello\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe biscuit joinery tip applies glue to the routed slot uniformly on both sides; the silicone tray allows for excess glue recovery without waste\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse with two-component epoxy or polyurethane glues\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone tips are designed for water-based dispersions (PVA, alkyl resin); with expanding polyurethane or epoxy glues, cleaning is difficult and silicone can degrade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot recommended for:\u003c\/strong\u003e application of expanding polyurethane glues (such as Gorilla Glue), two-component epoxy glues, or solvent-based contact adhesives, as cleaning of silicone tips with water is not feasible in these cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIGM applicator kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of tips included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDowel tips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 6, 8, 10, 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDOMINO tips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 6, 8, 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpecialized tips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBiscuit joinery, groove, capillary slot, narrow hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTip and tray material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarm water or dry peeling after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond Original – technical parameters (D2)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlkyl resin in aqueous dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDilutable with water\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, up to 5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond II Premium – technical parameters (D3)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA glue in dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\/orange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRF \/ hot press systems compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond III Ultimate – technical parameters (D4)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced proprietary polymer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–25 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for food contact\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (cutting boards and similar products)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 plastic handle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 silicone dowel tips: Ø 6, 8, 10, 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3 silicone DOMINO tips: Ø 6, 8, 10 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone biscuit joinery tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone groove tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone capillary slot tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone narrow hole tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone tray with front slots\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bottle of Titebond glue (variant of choice: Original D2, II Premium D3, III Ultimate D4)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre the DOMINO tips in the IGM kit compatible with the Festool DOMINO DF 500 and DF 700 systems?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 6, 8, and 10 mm DOMINO tips cover all sizes of DOMINO tenons used with Festool DF 500 and DF 700. The tip is inserted into the routed hole and distributes the glue on the inner walls before inserting the tenon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCorrect application involves pouring a small amount of glue into the tray, dipping the tip, and inserting it into the hole, rotating it slightly to distribute the glue over the entire inner surface. This method reduces air bubbles and glue squeeze-out from the joint during clamping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the practical difference between Titebond II D3 and Titebond III D4 for outdoor joinery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main difference is the degree of water resistance and open time: Titebond II D3 offers resistance to occasional moisture with an open time of 5 min; Titebond III D4 is waterproof with an open time of 10 min, suitable for prolonged water exposure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor window frames and garden furniture exposed to rain but not immersion, Titebond II D3 is sufficient and more economical. Titebond III D4 is recommended for structural elements exposed to repeated wetting and drying cycles (decks, outdoor shutters, garden structures) and for the production of cutting boards and food-contact items. The longer open time of Titebond III facilitates the assembly of complex structures with multiple joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow are the silicone tips of the IGM kit cleaned after use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tips should be washed with warm water immediately after use. If the glue has already dried, the silicone allows it to be removed by peeling, without the need for solvents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe silicone tray allows excess glue to be poured back into the original bottle using the front slots as a spout, avoiding waste. The tips can be rested on the same slots during work breaks to keep the work surface clean. Do not use this kit with polyurethane or epoxy glues: cleaning in those cases is not feasible with water and can damage the silicone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs Titebond Original D2 suitable for dowel joints on indoor furniture?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Titebond Original D2 is the standard choice for dowel joinery on indoor furniture: high initial tack, assembly time of 10–15 min, and dry strength superior to the wood itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum open time of 5 minutes requires preparing all dowels and applying glue to all holes before starting assembly. For complex structures with many simultaneous joints, or in environments with temperatures above 20°C that accelerate drying, it is advisable to switch to Titebond III D4, which offers an open time of 10 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan Titebond III D4 really be used for cutting boards and food-contact items?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Titebond III Ultimate meets European requirements for food contact and is explicitly indicated by the manufacturer for the production of cutting boards and similar products.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis certification applies to fully cured glue (24 hours of curing). The dry joint is resistant to washing with water, which is crucial for cutting boards subjected to frequent washing. It should be noted that Titebond Original D2 and Titebond II D3 do not have this specification for food contact: for cutting boards and wooden kitchen utensils, Titebond III is the correct choice within this kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Titebond","offers":[{"title":"Titebond III Ultimate Wood Glue D4 - 237ml (Green)","offer_id":53012871807304,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL23","price":39.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Original Wood Glue D2 - 237ml (red)","offer_id":53012871840072,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL32","price":39.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond II Premium Wood Glue D3 - 237ml (blue)","offer_id":53012871872840,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL45","price":39.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Kit_applicatori_colla_in_silicone_IGM_con_10_punte_e_vaschetta_abbinato_a_flacone_Titebond_vista_dall_alto.png?v=1777536442"},{"product_id":"kit-pennelli-colla-silicone-igm-titebond","title":"IGM Silicone glue brush kit with Titebond glue of your choice","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIGM silicone glue brush kit – 13 and 24 mm brushes, serrated spatula and tray, with Titebond glue of your choice\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM silicone glue brush kit is a hobby-professional accessory consisting of two 13 mm and 24 mm silicone brushes, a silicone spatula with a serrated edge for flat surfaces and tenons, and a silicone tray with front notches for collecting excess glue. The plastic handle is 40 mm long to reach deep mortises and dovetail joints. Available in a combo with Titebond glue of your choice: Original D2, II Premium D3, or III Ultimate D4. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official IGM and Titebond distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e24 mm silicone brush: for large surfaces and panels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e13 mm silicone brush: for narrow surfaces, mortises, and dovetail joints\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush handle length: 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSilicone spatula with serrated edge: for flat surfaces, flat tenons, and uniform distribution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSilicone tray with front notches: for collecting excess glue and resting brushes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: silicone (tips, spatula, tray) + plastic (handle)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleaning: lukewarm water or dry peeling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGlue included: Titebond of your choice (selectable variant)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Titebond glue to choose for your use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo is available with three variants of Titebond glue. The choice depends on the application environment and the required water resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eEN 204 Class\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOpen time\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMin. application temp.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhen to choose it\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Original\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor joinery, furniture, stairs, parquet: high initial tack, fast clamping, yellow color after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond II Premium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow frames, outdoor furniture, structures exposed to occasional moisture: the only D3 single-color glue certified EN 204, compatible with RF and hot press systems\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond III Ultimate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProlonged water exposure, cutting boards and food contact products, outdoor construction: mold, solvent and heat resistant, applicable at low temperatures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho this kit is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal carpenter assembling glued structures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 24 mm brush quickly covers large surfaces like side panels and shelves; the serrated spatula distributes glue in a uniform layer on flat tenons and tongue and groove joints\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHobbyist with joining work on small pieces and deep mortises\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 13 mm brush with a 40 mm handle reaches the bottom of mortises and dovetail joints where a standard brush cannot; the soft silicone leaves no bristle residue in the joint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse with two-component epoxy or polyurethane glues\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone brushes are designed for aqueous dispersions (PVA, alkyl resin); with expanding polyurethane or epoxy glues, cleaning with water is not effective and silicone can degrade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e application of expanding polyurethane glues, two-component epoxy glues or solvent-based contact adhesives, as cleaning the silicone brushes with water is not feasible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIGM Brush Kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone brush size 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone brush size 2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrush handle length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone with serrated and flat edge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone with front notches for glue recovery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTip and accessory material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexible plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLukewarm water or dry peeling after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond Original – technical parameters (D2)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlkyl resin in aqueous dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDilutable with water\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, up to 5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond II Premium – technical parameters (D3)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA glue in dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\/orange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRF \/ hot press systems compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond III Ultimate – technical parameters (D4)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced proprietary polymer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor and outdoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–25 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for food contact\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (cutting boards and similar products)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 handle with 24 mm silicone brush tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 handle with 13 mm silicone brush tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone spatula with serrated and flat edge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone tray with front notches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bottle of Titebond glue (variant of your choice: Original D2, II Premium D3, III Ultimate D4)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the IGM brush kit and the IGM tip applicator kit for dowels and DOMINO?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe brush kit is designed for flat surfaces, open mortises, and dovetail joints; the tip applicator kit is for cylindrical holes for 6–12 mm dowels and 6–10 mm DOMINO tenons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two kits are complementary: the 13 mm brush with a 40 mm handle fits into rectangular mortises and dovetail joints, while the cylindrical tips of the applicator kit distribute glue on the inner walls of circular holes where a flat brush cannot reach. Those who work with both dowels and open joints benefit from having both kits available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the serrated spatula in the IGM kit suitable for flat DOMINO tenons?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The serrated edge of the spatula distributes glue in a uniform layer on the flat surface of the DOMINO tenon before insertion into its recess, avoiding accumulations that would cause excessive squeeze-out when the joint is closed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe flat edge of the same tool is used to remove excess glue from the edges of the joint after closure, an operation that risks marking the wood with a metal spatula. The soft silicone slides on the surface without leaving scratches even on soft woods like poplar and linden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the practical difference between Titebond II D3 and Titebond III D4 for outdoor joinery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main difference is the degree of water resistance and open time: Titebond II D3 offers resistance to occasional moisture with an open time of 5 min; Titebond III D4 is waterproof with an open time of 10 min, suitable for prolonged water exposure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor window frames and garden furniture exposed to rain but not immersion, Titebond II D3 is sufficient and more economical. Titebond III D4 is recommended for structural elements exposed to repeated wetting and drying cycles and for the production of cutting boards and tools in contact with food. The longer open time of III facilitates the assembly of complex structures with many simultaneous joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan Titebond III D4 be used for cutting boards and food contact items?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Titebond III Ultimate meets European requirements for food contact and is indicated by the manufacturer for the production of cutting boards and similar products, once fully cured (24 hours).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTitebond Original D2 and Titebond II D3 do not have this specification: for cutting boards and wooden kitchen utensils, Titebond III is the correct choice within this combo. The dry joint is resistant to washing with water, a crucial condition for cutting boards subjected to frequent cleaning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you clean the silicone brushes in the IGM kit after use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe brushes should be washed with lukewarm water immediately after use. If the glue has dried, the silicone allows it to be peeled off without solvents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe silicone tray allows excess glue to be poured back into the original bottle using the front notches as a spout. The brushes can be rested on the same notches during breaks to prevent the tip from touching the work surface. Do not use this kit with polyurethane or epoxy glues: cleaning in those cases is not feasible with water.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Titebond","offers":[{"title":"Titebond III Ultimate Wood Glue D4 - 237ml (green)","offer_id":53014058598728,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL18","price":20.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Titebond Original Wood Glue D2 - 237ml (red)","offer_id":53014058631496,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL28","price":20.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Titebond II Premium Wood Glue D3 - 237ml (blue)","offer_id":53014058664264,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL38","price":20.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Kit_pennelli_colla_in_silicone_IGM_con_pennelli_13_e_24_mm_spatola_dentata_e_vaschetta_vista_dall_alto.png?v=1777544438"},{"product_id":"rullo-applicatore-colla-silicone-igm-titebond","title":"IGM Silicone Glue Roller Kit – Ø 20 mm with Titebond glue of your choice","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIGM Silicone Glue Applicator Roller Kit – Ø 20 mm, 47 mm width, grooves for even distribution, with Titebond glue of choice\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM silicone glue applicator roller is an accessory for hobbyist-professional use, consisting of a silicone roller with Ø 20 mm and 47 mm width, featuring angled grooves to retain glue and ensure even distribution without excess, and a silicone tray with front cut-outs for collecting excess glue. The design, free of protruding parts, allows application right up to the edge of the workpiece without damaging the material. Available in a combo with Titebond glue of your choice: Original D2, II Premium D3, or III Ultimate D4. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official IGM and Titebond distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoller diameter: Ø 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoller width: 47 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAngled grooves: retain glue on the roller, reduce dripping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApplication up to the edge: design without protruding parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSilicone tray with front cut-outs: collects excess glue and provides roller rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoller and tray material: silicone\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCleaning: warm water or dry peeling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGlue included: Titebond of choice (selectable variant)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Titebond glue to choose for your use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo is available with three Titebond glue variants. The choice depends on the application environment and the required water resistance level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eEN 204 Class\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOpen time\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMin. application temp.\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhen to choose it\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Original\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior joinery, furniture, stairs, parquet: high initial tack, fast clamping, yellow color after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond II Premium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow frames, outdoor furniture, structures exposed to occasional humidity: only D3 single-color glue certified EN 204, compatible with RF and hot press systems\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond III Ultimate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProlonged water exposure, cutting boards and food-contact products, outdoor construction: resistance to mold, solvents, and heat, applicable at low temperatures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this kit for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter gluing large surfaces (panels, sides, tops)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 47 mm width and angled grooves distribute glue in a uniform layer on flat surfaces in a single pass, reducing spreading time compared to a flat brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHobbyist with veneering or panel assembly work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe design without protruding parts allows application right up to the edge of the panel without leaving uncovered areas or damaging the material; the tray limits waste on small quantities of glue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication in holes, deep mortises or narrow grooves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe Ø 20 mm diameter and 47 mm width make the roller suitable for flat and wide surfaces; for cylindrical holes, mortises, and narrow grooves, the IGM tip applicator kit is the correct tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e application of expanding polyurethane glues, two-component epoxy glues, or solvent-based contact glues, as cleaning the silicone roller with water is not feasible with these.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIGM roller kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrooves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngled, to retain glue and reduce dripping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication up to the edge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (design without protruding parts)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone with front cut-outs for glue recovery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller and tray material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarm water or dry peeling after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond Original – technical parameters (D2)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlkyl resin in aqueous dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDilutable with water\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, up to 5%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond II Premium – technical parameters (D3)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA dispersion glue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\/orange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRF \/ hot press systems compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTitebond III Ultimate – technical parameters (D4)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced proprietary polymer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater resistance class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4 (EN 204)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColor after drying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–25 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull cure time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperating and storage temperature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°–24°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for food contact\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (cutting boards and similar products)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone roller Ø 20 mm, 47 mm width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 silicone tray with front cut-outs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bottle of Titebond glue (variant of choice: Original D2, II Premium D3, III Ultimate D4)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the IGM roller and the IGM brush kit for glue application?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe roller is designed for large, flat surfaces such as panels, sides, and tops; the brushes in the IGM kit are suitable for narrower surfaces, open mortises, and dovetail joints where the roller does not fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor veneering or panel gluing in a single pass, the 47 mm roller is faster and distributes a more uniform layer than a brush. For mixed applications, those working on both large surfaces and profiled joints benefit from having both tools available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDo the angled grooves of the IGM roller help reduce\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Titebond","offers":[{"title":"Titebond III Ultimate Wood Glue D4 - 237ml (green)","offer_id":53014242033992,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL37","price":15.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Titebond Original Wood Glue D2 - 237ml (red)","offer_id":53014242066760,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL47","price":15.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Titebond II Premium Wood Glue D3 - 237ml (blue)","offer_id":53014242099528,"sku":"ComboLEP-SL57","price":15.37,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Rullo_applicatore_colla_in_silicone_IGM_20_mm_con_vaschetta_silicone_e_scanalature_per_distribuzione_uniforme_vista_laterale.png?v=1777545237"},{"product_id":"kit-applicatore-colla-igm-13-punte-titebond","title":"IGM Glue applicator kit – 13 dowel nozzles with choice of Titebond glue","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIGM Glue Applicator Kit – 13 interchangeable tips for every joint type, 2x 250 ml bottles, stand, with choice of Titebond glue\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM glue applicator kit is a hobbyist-professional accessory consisting of 13 interchangeable plastic tips for every type of wood joint, 2x 250 ml bottles with threads compatible with Titebond 237 ml bottles, 2 tip caps, 1 bottle cap, and 1 bench stand to store the entire set. The kit covers dowels from 4 to 12 mm, DOMINO tenons, size 20 biscuits, dovetail joints, 4 mm grooves, nylon brush application, and 60 mm roller for large surfaces. Available in a combo with a choice of 13 Titebond glue variants. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official IGM and Titebond distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard tip: general application\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePinpoint tip: precision application on small areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60 mm roller: large flat surfaces, panels, sides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize 20 biscuit tip: biscuit joint slot\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 mm groove tip: grooves from min 4 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon brush: application on profiles and irregular surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDovetail tip: dovetail joints\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDOMINO flat tenon tip: Festool DOMINO tenons\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDowel tips: Ø 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 mm (5 pcs)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottle threads: compatible with Titebond 237 ml plastic bottles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottles included: 2×250 ml\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAccessories: 2 tip caps, 1 bottle cap, 1 bench stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich Titebond glue to choose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo is available with 13 Titebond glue variants. The following table summarizes the main characteristics to guide your choice based on use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGlue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eType\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWater rating\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOpen time\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMin. temp\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDry color\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWhen to choose it\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Original D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAliphatic resin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior joinery, furniture, parquet; high initial tack, fast clamping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond II Premium D3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYellow\/orange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow frames, outdoor furniture, occasional humidity; RF and hot press compatible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond III Ultimate D4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced polymer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 10 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProlonged water exposure, food-contact cutting boards, low temperatures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond II Dark D3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior and exterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark woods (walnut, wenge, ebony): invisible joint on dark-colored essences\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Quick \u0026amp; Thick D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTranslucent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDecorative moldings, vertical applications: 3× higher viscosity than standard PVA, no drip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Speed Set D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh solid PVA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2–4 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTranslucent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction with rapid cycles: assembly time 8–10 min, visible under UV light for glue line control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond All Purpose White D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVA dispersion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 5 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTranslucent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral hobby use: wood, paper, fabric, ceramic; not for structural joints\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Cold Press D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModified PVA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCold veneering on MDF, chipboard, plywood: economical alternative to contact adhesives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Hide Glue D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural protein\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 15 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTranslucent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRestoration of antique furniture, musical instruments: heat reversible, high creep-resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Instant Thin CA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCyanoacrylate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 sec\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRepair of capillary cracks, delaminated veneer edges; low viscosity, penetrates by capillarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Instant Medium CA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCyanoacrylate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 sec\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFilling knots, gluing turning blanks, pen tube fastening; medium viscosity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Instant Thick CA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCyanoacrylate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sec\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45° miter joints, rapid assembly of jigs and fixtures; high viscosity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitebond Instant Gel Black CA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCyanoacrylate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 sec\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlossy black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFilling knots and voids with decorative black effect, inlays, spalted wood; 500 cPs viscosity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNote on CA glues (Instant Thin, Medium, Thick, Gel Black):\u003c\/strong\u003e not suitable for food contact products. Use acetone for cleaning, not water. IGM kit tips and bottles are designed for water-based PVA glues; CA glues are applied directly from the original bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this kit for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArtisanal carpenter with mixed joinery (dowels, DOMINO, biscuits, dovetails)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 13 tips cover all standard joints in one set; the thread compatible with Titebond 237 ml bottles allows mounting the tip directly on the original bottle without decanting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyist with occasional use of different glues for different applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe 2 included 250 ml bottles allow keeping two different glues ready simultaneously (e.g., PVA for structural joints and CA for quick repairs); the bench stand keeps everything organized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplication of CA (cyanoacrylate) glues using the kit tips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe plastic tips in the kit are designed for water-based PVA glues; CA glues polymerize on contact with moisture and can irreversibly clog the tips in seconds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e application of CA glues using the kit tips (risk of immediate clogging); expanding polyurethane glues or two-component epoxy glues not compatible with water cleaning of plastic tips.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIGM applicator kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of tips included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDowel tips\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDOMINO tip (flat tenon)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBiscuit tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 20 (1 pc)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDovetail tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGroove tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emin 4 mm (1 pc)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePinpoint tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNylon brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoller\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm (1 pc)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBottles included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2×250 ml\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBottle threads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible with Titebond 237 ml plastic bottles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTip caps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBottle cap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBench stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 pc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 standard tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 pinpoint tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 60 mm roller\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 size 20 biscuit tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 4 mm groove tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 nylon brush\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 dovetail tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 DOMINO flat tenon tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 dowel tips: Ø 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2x 250 ml bottles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2 tip caps\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bottle cap\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bench stand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 bottle of Titebond glue (choice of 13 available variants)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the thread on the 250 ml IGM bottles compatible with all Titebond bottles?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe thread is compatible with Titebond 237 ml plastic bottles. The tips screw directly onto the original Titebond bottle without the need to decant into the bottles included in the kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2x 250 ml bottles included in the kit are useful for those who buy Titebond in larger formats (473 ml or 946 ml) and want to transfer a limited amount for the current job, keeping the main bottle sealed. The included tip caps allow keeping the tip mounted on the bottle without the glue drying at the opening between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between Titebond Cold Press and other PVA glues for veneering?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTitebond Cold Press is the only variant in the kit specifically formulated for cold laminating veneer onto MDF, chipboard, and plywood. It has an open time of 15 minutes, the longest among the kit's PVA glues, and prevents bleed-through on open-grain veneers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard PVA glues (Original, II, III) have an open time of 5–10 minutes, which is insufficient for positioning veneers on large surfaces. Cold Press with the 60 mm roller included in the kit is the optimal combination for veneering panels: the roller distributes the glue in an even layer without excess, and the 15 minutes of open time allow positioning and centering the sheet before pressing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs Titebond Hide Glue suitable for restoring antique furniture with original rabbit skin glue joints?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Titebond Hide Glue is the only glue in the kit based on natural protein, heat-reversible, with the same compatibility characteristics as traditional rabbit skin glue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReversibility is crucial in restoration: a joint glued with Hide Glue can be disassembled by applying moist heat without damaging the wood, just like original joints of antique furniture. PVA glues are not reversible after hardening. For stringed musical instruments, Hide Glue is the obligatory choice, as its high creep-resistance ensures stability over time under constant string tension. Once opened, it is advisable to use the necessary amount without prolonged storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs Titebond Speed Set different from Titebond Original only in terms of cure speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, with a significant operational difference: Speed Set's assembly time is 8–10 minutes versus Original's 10–15 minutes, with a higher minimum storage temperature (15°C vs 10°C).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeed Set is formulated for production environments where reducing clamping time is critical for productivity. UV light visibility is an additional advantage for quality control of the glue line. For hobbyist or artisanal use with non-serialized assembly, Titebond Original offers the same level of strength with greater flexibility in working times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the difference between the four Titebond CA glues (Thin, Medium, Thick, Gel Black) in the kit?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe four CA glues differ in viscosity and open time: Thin (5 sec, low viscosity) for capillary cracks; Medium (7 sec, medium viscosity) for knots and turning; Thick (10 sec, high viscosity) for butt joints; Gel Black (30 sec, 500 cPs) for decorative black filling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll four polymerize on contact with moisture and are cleaned with acetone, not water. They are not suitable for food contact products. The plastic tips of the IGM kit should not be used with CA glues: the risk of irreversible clogging in a few seconds is real. CA glues are applied directly from the original bottle with the dedicated applicator cap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the IGM dovetail tip also work with half-blind dovetail joints?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The dovetail tip is designed to distribute glue on the angled surfaces of dovetail joints, both through and blind, where a flat brush cannot reach the inclined walls evenly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe geometry of the tip follows the trapezoidal profile of the joint and distributes the glue over the entire contact surface in a single pass. For half-blind dovetail joints, where maneuverability is reduced, the tip is preferable to the nylon brush included in the kit, which is less precise in angled geometries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Titebond","offers":[{"title":"Titebond Original Wood Glue D2 - 473ml","offer_id":53015082729800,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-1","price":31.0,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond II Premium Wood Glue D3 - 473ml","offer_id":53015082762568,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-2","price":31.67,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond III Ultimate Wood Glue D4 - 473ml","offer_id":53015082795336,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-3","price":36.08,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Instant Thick Glue - 59ml","offer_id":53015082828104,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-4","price":36.35,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Instant Medium Jet Black Glue - 59ml","offer_id":53015082860872,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-5","price":45.91,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Quick \u0026 Thick Wood Glue - 473ml","offer_id":53015082893640,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-6","price":31.17,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond II Dark Wood Glue D3 - 237ml","offer_id":53015082926408,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-7","price":28.59,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Cold Press for Veneer Wood Glue - 946ml","offer_id":53015082959176,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-8","price":34.89,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Genuine Hide Wood Glue - 237ml","offer_id":53015082991944,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-9","price":32.71,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Instant Thin Glue - 59ml","offer_id":53015083024712,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-10","price":36.35,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Instant Medium Glue - 59ml","offer_id":53015083057480,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-11","price":36.36,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Instant Gel Glue - 59ml","offer_id":53015083090248,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-12","price":39.38,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond Speed Set Wood Glue - 237ml","offer_id":53015083123016,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-13","price":33.8,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Titebond All Purpose White Glue - 473ml","offer_id":53015083155784,"sku":"ComboLEP-SNL-14","price":32.23,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Kit_applicatore_colla_IGM_con_13_punte_intercambiabili_2_flaconi_da_250_ml_supporto_e_tappi_vista_dall_alto_con_dotazione_completa.png?v=1777550938"},{"product_id":"pialla-spessore-igm-ps33-spirale-carrello-st1m-omaggio","title":"IGM PS33 330mm Planer-Thicknesser Combo with Helical Cutterhead","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIGM PS33 Portable Thickness Planer – 36 HW insert spiral cutterhead, 330 mm width, with free ST1M mobile base and scalable dust collection adapter\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM PS33 is a portable thickness planer for hobbyist and professional use, featuring a spiral cutterhead with 36 reversible 15x15x2.5 mm HW inserts arranged in 4 spirals, a working width of 330 mm, a 1,800 W single-phase 230 V motor, and a spindle speed of 9,000 rpm. It is the first portable thickness planer on the European market with a spiral cutterhead using carbide inserts. This bundle includes a free IGM ST1M mobile base (200 kg capacity, 570×500 mm top) and an ABS scalable dust collection adapter from 25 to 100 mm. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official IGM distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax planing width: 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax workpiece thickness: 156 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMin workpiece length: 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax depth per pass: 3.2 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpiral cutterhead: 36 reversible 15x15x2.5 mm HW inserts, R=150, 4 spirals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 9,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutterhead diameter: 46 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeed rate: 7.9 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1,800 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V \/ 50 Hz \/ single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust collection: Integrated fan + Ø 62 mm port\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDepth stop: 7 positions (3.2–38 mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNoise emission: 96 dB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine weight: 35 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree item: IGM ST1M mobile base – 200 kg capacity, 570×500 mm laminated MDF top, 835 mm height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFree item: ABS scalable dust collection adapter – outer diameters 25, 50, 63, 75, 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat this bundle includes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bundle consists of the IGM PS33 portable thickness planer with its complete standard equipment, plus two free accessories that complete the workstation at no additional cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eComponent\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eKey Technical Data\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIGM PS33 – Portable Thickness Planer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain machine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpiral cutterhead 36 HW inserts, 330 mm width, 1,800 W, 230 V single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIGM ST1M – Mobile Base (free)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMobile workbench stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg capacity, 570×500 mm laminated MDF top, 835 mm height, foot-operated lift\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS Scalable Dust Collection Adapter (free)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdaptation of port to dust collection system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter diameters: 25, 50, 63, 75, 100 mm – cuttable with fine-tooth saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PS33 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe IGM PS33 portable thickness planer is used by artisan joiners, solid wood floor restorers, and window\/door manufacturers who work on construction sites or in workshops with limited space. The spiral cutterhead with 4-position carbide inserts allows for planing hard, exotic, and knotty woods without tear-out. The included free ST1M mobile base solves the problem of fixed positioning in compact workshops: the PS33 can be quickly moved between different work areas and locked with the foot pedal during operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PS33 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter with mobile workshop or construction site\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg weight and 230 V single-phase power allow use on site; folding tables reduce bulk during transport; the free ST1M mobile base facilitates movement in the workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall workshop with limited space and multiple machines in rotation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe ST1M mobile base (200 kg capacity) allows the PS33 to be moved without manual lifting; the free scalable adapter adapts the Ø 62 mm port to any available dust collection hose\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeries production with pieces wider than 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot indicated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThe maximum width of 330 mm excludes planing massive boards and glued panels of greater width; for continuous production, consider fixed bench planers with a width of 400 mm or more\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous planing of wood-based panels in industrial settings; pieces shorter than 120 mm; applications requiring widths greater than 330 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax planing width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax workpiece thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e156 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin workpiece length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax depth per pass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop – available positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 positions (3.2–38 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCutterhead and Feed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterhead type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpiral – 4 spirals\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of inserts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36 pcs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInsert dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15x15x2.5 mm, R=150\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInsert rotations\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 (reversible without replacement)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutterhead diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed rate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.9 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and Power Supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,800 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz \/ single-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor protection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverload protection; automatic anti-restart lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDust Collection and Noise\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust collection system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated fan + Ø 62 mm port\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse without dust collector\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes (dust bag included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNoise emission\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e96 dB\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and Weight – PS33\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with tables closed (L×W×H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340×615×555 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with tables open (L×W×H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e850×615×555 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet machine weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions (L×W×H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e415×660×545 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e39 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrder code PS33\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSTE-PS33\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIGM ST1M Mobile Base – Free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop dimensions (L×W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570×500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e835 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLaminated MDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMobility mechanism\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels with foot-operated lift\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrder code ST1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSTP-ST1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eABS Scalable Dust Collection Adapter – Free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable outer diameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25, 50, 63, 75, 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of sections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 (each section is one diameter)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting sections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWith fine-tooth saw – each section can form 1 or more adapters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard Equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIGM PS33 portable thickness planer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e36 reversible 15x15x2.5 mm HW inserts (installed in the cutterhead)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e5 spare HW inserts with screws\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust bag connection kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTorx T25 wrench for insert replacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIGM ST1M mobile base – 200 kg capacity, 570×500 mm laminated MDF top (free)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eABS scalable dust collection adapter 25–100 mm (free)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the free ST1M mobile base already configured to support the PS33 or does it require drilling?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ST1M base requires drilling the MDF top to match the PS33's mounting points. The laminated MDF top does not have pre-drilled holes because the base is universal for machines with different footprints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PS33 with tables closed measures 340×615 mm: the width of 615 mm exceeds the 570 mm of the ST1M top, so attachment is done with bolts passing through the MDF into the PS33's base frame anchor points. Drilling only requires a drill and does not compromise the stability of the base. Once attached, the PS33 on the ST1M forms a complete mobile workstation that can be moved with the foot pedal without lifting the 35 kg machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the free ABS scalable adapter compatible with the PS33's Ø 62 mm port?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scalable adapter includes the 63 mm outer diameter, which fits the PS33's Ø 62 mm port for connection to dust collection systems with a 63 mm flexible hose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo connect a dust collector with a different diameter hose, cut the corresponding section of the adapter with a fine-tooth saw. The available sections (25, 50, 63, 75, 100 mm) cover standard dust collection hose diameters for hobbyist and professional use. The adapter can also be used to adapt the dust collection hose to tools or machines other than the PS33 with ports of other diameters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many times can each insert on the PS33's spiral cutterhead be rotated?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach HW insert has 4 rotational positions. When one edge wears out, the insert is rotated 90° to present a new cutting edge, without replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a total of 36 inserts and 4 rotations each, the available cutting capacity before a complete change is equivalent to 144 sharpenings of a traditional HSS knife. Replacement or rotation only requires the Torx T25 wrench included in the standard equipment, without any cutterhead adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan the PS33 operate without a dust collector connected?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The PS33 is equipped with an integrated fan that directs chips into the included dust bag, without the need for an external dust collector.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe free ABS scalable adapter allows connection of an external dust collector for prolonged work sessions or in enclosed environments with high dust production. The PS33's Ø 62 mm port fits the 63 mm section of the scalable adapter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the PS33 spiral cutterhead also work on hardwoods like oak, ash, and teak?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The spiral cutterhead with carbide inserts is specifically recommended for hard and exotic woods, where straight HSS knife cutterheads often cause tear-out and require frequent sharpening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe spiral geometry (4 spirals, 36 helical inserts) distributes the cut progressively along the width of the workpiece, reducing vibrations and improving the finish on woods with irregular or knotty grain. The hardness of the HW carbide inserts is significantly superior to HSS, resulting in much slower wear on oak, ash, teak, and wenge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat spare parts are available for the PS33 and where can they be ordered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main spare part is the reversible HW insert, code IGM N013 (15x15x2.5 mm, R=150), available from Krollit's warehouse in Monteforte Irpino (AV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe N013 insert is the same one used in several IGM spiral cutterhead models, which simplifies spare parts management for those who own multiple machines from the same range. It can be ordered online or by phone at +39 0825-1494022. Replacement does not require a specialized technician: the Torx T25 wrench included in the standard equipment is sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"igm","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":53015637852488,"sku":"ComboSTE-PS33","price":1163.64,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Pialla_a_spessore_portatile_IGM_PS33_con_testata_a_spirale_36_inserti_HW_carrello_mobile_ST1M_e_raccordo_aspirazione_scalare_in_omaggio_vista_frontale.png?v=1777557369"},{"product_id":"combo-trapano-a-colonna-gude-gtb-13-355-con-morsa-e-punte-hss","title":"Güde GTB 13\/355 Bench Drill Combo with Vise and HSS Drill Bits","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Güde GTB 13\/355 is a benchtop drill press for hobby and professional use, featuring a 350 W motor, a 1.5–13 mm keyless chuck, 5 speeds from 580 to 2,650 rpm, and a 50 mm spindle travel. Güde is a German brand founded in 1979. Distributed in Italy by Krollit, official Güde distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eMotor power: 350 W\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V single-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eChuck drilling capacity: 1.5–13 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSpeeds: 5 steps from 580 to 2,650 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSpindle travel: 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSpindle-column distance: 104 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSpindle-base distance: 355 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWork table: 160 × 160 mm, tiltable\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSpindle taper: B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNet weight: 22 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eKrollit Combo: drill press + clamping vice + HSS drill bit set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GTB 13\/355 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis benchtop drill press is mainly chosen by advanced hobbyists, maintenance technicians, small metalworking shops, and light spare parts workshops that drill holes up to 13 mm in steel and wood. Typical use: drilling brackets, supports, thin profiles, aluminum plates, hardwood blocks for amateur woodworking projects. With its belt speed change (580–2,650 rpm), it covers both low-speed metal drilling and high-speed light wood milling. The combo with vice and HSS drill bit set makes it ready for use immediately without needing to purchase additional accessories, a solution requested by those setting up a new workstation or replacing an entry-level drill press.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShipping 5-9 business days (7 days for southern regions). Technical support in Italian available for the entire product lifetime. Original Güde spare parts available from Krollit warehouse, Monteforte Irpino (AV).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GTB 13\/355 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eReason\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdvanced hobbyist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 mm capacity and 5 speeds cover typical home workshop materials, 350 W motor is adequate for non-continuous use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall maintenance workshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 kg weight allows it to be installed on any workbench, 230 V single-phase power supply does not require a three-phase system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetalworking shop with intensive use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot suitable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 W motor and 50 mm travel are sized for occasional use, not for repeated cycles on thick steels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e continuous drilling on steel over 8-10 mm thick, industrial series production, and drilling hardened steels. For these cases, the Güde floor-standing range (e.g., models with 550 W motor or higher) is more appropriately sized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrequency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeyless chuck capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5–13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of speeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e580–2,650 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 × 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTilting table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e104 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGüde GTB 13\/355 drill press\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e1.5–13 mm keyless chuck\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePolycarbonate chuck guard\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eClamping vice for workpiece fixation\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHSS drill bit set\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eUser manual in Italian\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat type of power supply does the Güde GTB 13\/355 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe GTB 13\/355 operates on 230 V single-phase power, the same standard Italian household outlet. No three-phase system or dedicated industrial line is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 350 W motor has low power consumption and can also be connected to a power strip with surge protection. For workshops without three-phase power, this is the most common configuration for benchtop drill presses and allows for immediate installation in a garage, home laboratory, or small maintenance workshop without modifications to the electrical system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat does the Krollit combo with vice and drill bit set include?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe combo includes the Güde GTB 13\/355 drill press with its standard equipment, a clamping vice for securing the workpiece to the work table, and a ready-to-use HSS drill bit set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe vice allows safe working with metal pieces and precise clamping of wood blocks or thin profiles, preventing accidental rotation of the workpiece during drilling. The HSS drill bit set covers the most commonly used diameters for drilling in mild steel, aluminum, and wood. The combo is designed for those setting up a complete workstation without having to purchase accessories separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum thickness it can drill in steel?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWith a 50 mm spindle travel and a 350 W motor, the GTB 13\/355 comfortably drills mild steel up to 4-6 mm thick with standard diameter drill bits, and up to 13 mm with controlled feed and low speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor thicker steels or continuous operations, it is necessary to reduce the speed to the lowest settings (580 rpm) and use cutting lubricant. For holes larger than 10 mm in alloy steels or hardened steels, a benchtop drill press in this power range is not the dimensionally correct choice: it is better to opt for floor-standing models with at least a 550 W motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eHow do you change the speed on the GTB 13\/355?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eSpeed change is done manually by moving the belt to 5 different pulley pairs, accessible by opening the top cover of the motor. The 5 speeds cover the range from 580 to 2,650 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLow speeds (580-980 rpm) are suitable for drilling steel and large diameters, intermediate speeds (1,500-2,000 rpm) for aluminum and brass, and high speeds (2,650 rpm) for wood and plastic with small drill bits. A reference table for speed\/material\/diameter is affixed to the inside of the motor cover for guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat maintenance does the drill press require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eMaintenance is limited to periodic cleaning of the column and work table from chips, checking belt tension, and light lubrication of the spindle travel rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eBelts are standard commercial spare parts, replaceable after several hundred hours of operation. The keyless chuck requires no internal maintenance but should be cleaned of dust and lubricants. Original Güde spare parts are available from the Krollit warehouse in Monteforte Irpino. Technical support in Italian assists customers with spare parts and diagnostics even after the warranty period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Guede","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":53020532867400,"sku":"combo55200","price":109.43,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/rapano-colonna-banco-guede-gtb-13-355-combo-morsa-punte-hss.jpg?v=1777631248"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/collections\/combo_deals.jpg?v=1777760369","url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/combo-deal.oembed","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}